PowerPC64 dot-sym testsuite fixes
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item common
1096 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097 link.
1098
1099 @item defs
1100 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1101 shared libraries are still allowed.
1102
1103 @item execstack
1104 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
1106 @item global
1107 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
1111 @item initfirst
1112 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117 objects.
1118
1119 @item interpose
1120 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121 but the primary executable.
1122
1123 @item lazy
1124 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127 Lazy binding is the default.
1128
1129 @item loadfltr
1130 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131 runtime.
1132
1133 @item muldefs
1134 Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136 @item nocombreloc
1137 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
1139 @item nocommon
1140 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141 link.
1142
1143 @item nocopyreloc
1144 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1146
1147 @item nodefaultlib
1148 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149 ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151 @item nodelete
1152 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154 @item nodlopen
1155 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157 @item nodump
1158 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
1160 @item noexecstack
1161 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
1163 @item text
1164 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166 @item notext
1167 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169 @item textoff
1170 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
1172 @item norelro
1173 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
1175 @item now
1176 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180 first called.
1181
1182 @item origin
1183 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
1185 @item relro
1186 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
1188 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1195 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
1199 @item bndplt
1200 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
1202 @item noextern-protected-data
1203 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1207 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1208 i386 and x86-64.
1209
1210 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
1216 @item noreloc-overflow
1217 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
1221 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
1235 @end table
1236
1237 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1238
1239 @kindex -(
1240 @cindex groups of archives
1241 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1242 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253 resolved.
1254
1255 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257 more archives.
1258
1259 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1264 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1265 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269 restore the old behaviour.
1270
1271 @kindex --as-needed
1272 @kindex --no-as-needed
1273 @item --as-needed
1274 @itemx --no-as-needed
1275 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1276 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1277 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1279 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1280 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1282 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1284 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1288
1289 @kindex --add-needed
1290 @kindex --no-add-needed
1291 @item --add-needed
1292 @itemx --no-add-needed
1293 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1297
1298 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1300 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302 @kindex -Bdynamic
1303 @kindex -dy
1304 @kindex -call_shared
1305 @item -Bdynamic
1306 @itemx -dy
1307 @itemx -call_shared
1308 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1313 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1314
1315 @kindex -Bgroup
1316 @item -Bgroup
1317 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1320 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1322
1323 @kindex -Bstatic
1324 @kindex -dn
1325 @kindex -non_shared
1326 @kindex -static
1327 @item -Bstatic
1328 @itemx -dn
1329 @itemx -non_shared
1330 @itemx -static
1331 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1335 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1336 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1340 libraries.
1341
1342 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1343 @item -Bsymbolic
1344 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1347 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1352
1353 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1356 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1357 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1360 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1361 libraries and position independent executables.
1362
1363 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371 which support shared libraries.
1372
1373 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
1376 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377 @item --dynamic-list-data
1378 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
1385 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
1389 @kindex --check-sections
1390 @kindex --no-check-sections
1391 @item --check-sections
1392 @itemx --no-check-sections
1393 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1394 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1395 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1398 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1399 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401 option.
1402
1403 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1407 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1408 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1409 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1410 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1411 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1412 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1413 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1415
1416 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1417 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1423 symbols.
1424
1425 @cindex cross reference table
1426 @kindex --cref
1427 @item --cref
1428 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1436 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438 symbol are listed.
1439
1440 @cindex common allocation
1441 @kindex --no-define-common
1442 @item --no-define-common
1443 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
1458 @cindex symbols, from command line
1459 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1461 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1468 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1471
1472 @cindex demangling, from command line
1473 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1474 @kindex --no-demangle
1475 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1476 @itemx --no-demangle
1477 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1481 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1484 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1486
1487 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1488 @kindex -I@var{file}
1489 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490 @item -I@var{file}
1491 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1492 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495 doing.
1496
1497 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1499 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
1504 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1505 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1506 @item --fatal-warnings
1507 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1510
1511 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512 @item --force-exe-suffix
1513 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522 @kindex --gc-sections
1523 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1524 @cindex garbage collection
1525 @item --gc-sections
1526 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1527 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1528 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1529 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1530 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1533
1534 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
1544 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1545 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1546 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
1549 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1550 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551 @cindex garbage collection
1552 @item --print-gc-sections
1553 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559 line.
1560
1561 @kindex --print-output-format
1562 @cindex output format
1563 @item --print-output-format
1564 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
1568 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1569 @cindex memory usage
1570 @item --print-memory-usage
1571 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577 @smallexample
1578 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581 @end smallexample
1582
1583 @cindex help
1584 @cindex usage
1585 @kindex --help
1586 @item --help
1587 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
1589 @kindex --target-help
1590 @item --target-help
1591 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
1593 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1595 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1596 @option{-M} option, above.
1597
1598 @cindex memory usage
1599 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1600 @item --no-keep-memory
1601 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1603 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1604 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1605 while linking a large executable.
1606
1607 @kindex --no-undefined
1608 @kindex -z defs
1609 @item --no-undefined
1610 @itemx -z defs
1611 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1615 libraries being linked in.
1616
1617 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618 @kindex -z muldefs
1619 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1620 @itemx -z muldefs
1621 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623 first definition will be used.
1624
1625 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1626 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1627 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1628 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1629 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1630 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
1635 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638 a shared library.
1639
1640 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641 libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643 @itemize @bullet
1644 @item
1645 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647 resolvable at load time.
1648 @item
1649 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655 appropriate memset function.
1656 @end itemize
1657
1658 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1659 @item --no-undefined-version
1660 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662 will be issued instead.
1663
1664 @kindex --default-symver
1665 @item --default-symver
1666 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667 exported symbols.
1668
1669 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1670 @item --default-imported-symver
1671 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672 imported symbols.
1673
1674 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1676 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1677 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1679 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1680 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682 inappropriate.
1683
1684 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
1689 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1690 @item --no-whole-archive
1691 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1692 archive files.
1693
1694 @cindex output file after errors
1695 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696 @item --noinhibit-exec
1697 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
1702 @kindex -nostdlib
1703 @item -nostdlib
1704 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
1708 @ifclear SingleFormat
1709 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1711 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1713 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1714 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1716 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722 @end ifclear
1723
1724 @kindex --out-implib
1725 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1726 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
1734 @kindex -pie
1735 @kindex --pic-executable
1736 @item -pie
1737 @itemx --pic-executable
1738 @cindex position independent executables
1739 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1742 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1743 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
1746 @kindex -qmagic
1747 @item -qmagic
1748 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750 @kindex -Qy
1751 @item -Qy
1752 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754 @kindex --relax
1755 @cindex synthesizing linker
1756 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1757 @cindex --no-relax
1758 @item --relax
1759 @itemx --no-relax
1760 An option with machine dependent effects.
1761 @ifset GENERIC
1762 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763 @end ifset
1764 @ifset H8300
1765 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1766 @end ifset
1767 @ifset I960
1768 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1769 @end ifset
1770 @ifset XTENSA
1771 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772 @end ifset
1773 @ifset M68HC11
1774 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775 @end ifset
1776 @ifset NIOSII
1777 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778 @end ifset
1779 @ifset POWERPC
1780 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781 @end ifset
1782
1783 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1787 instructions, and combining constant values.
1788
1789 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791 @ifset GENERIC
1792 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793 family of processors.
1794 @end ifset
1795
1796 @ifset GENERIC
1797 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798 but ignored.
1799 @end ifset
1800
1801 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
1804 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1805 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1807 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1809 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812 @ifset GENERIC
1813 (such as VxWorks)
1814 @end ifset
1815 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816 run-time memory.
1817
1818 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819 or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824 @ifset GENERIC
1825 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1826 @cindex runtime library search path
1827 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1828 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1829 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1830 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1831 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1832 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1834 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1835 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
1838 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1839 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1840 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1844 file systems.
1845
1846 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1847 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1848 the @option{-rpath} option.
1849 @end ifset
1850
1851 @ifset GENERIC
1852 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1853 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1855 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857 of the input files.
1858
1859 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1862 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1863 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1864 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1865 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866 appearing multiple times.
1867
1868 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1869 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1870 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1871 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1872 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1873
1874 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1875 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1876 supported.
1877
1878 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1879 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1880 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1881 runtime linker would do.
1882
1883 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1884 libraries:
1885 @enumerate
1886 @item
1887 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1888 @item
1889 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1890 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1891 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1892 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1893 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1894 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1895 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1896 @item
1897 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1898 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1899 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1900 @item
1901 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1902 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1903 @item
1904 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1905 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1906 @item
1907 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1908 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1909 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1910 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1911 @item
1912 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1913 @item
1914 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1915 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1916 @end enumerate
1917
1918 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1919 warning and continue with the link.
1920 @end ifset
1921
1922 @kindex -shared
1923 @kindex -Bshareable
1924 @item -shared
1925 @itemx -Bshareable
1926 @cindex shared libraries
1927 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1928 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1929 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1930 undefined symbols in the link.
1931
1932 @kindex --sort-common
1933 @item --sort-common
1934 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1935 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1936 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1937 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1938 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1939 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1940 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1941 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1942
1943 @kindex --sort-section=name
1944 @item --sort-section=name
1945 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1946 patterns in the linker script.
1947
1948 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1949 @item --sort-section=alignment
1950 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1951 patterns in the linker script.
1952
1953 @kindex --split-by-file
1954 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1955 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1956 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1957 size of 1 if not given.
1958
1959 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1960 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1961 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1962 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1963 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1964 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1965 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1966 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1967 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1968 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1969 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1970 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1971
1972 @kindex --stats
1973 @item --stats
1974 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1975 as execution time and memory usage.
1976
1977 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1978 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1979 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1980 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1981 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1982
1983 @kindex --traditional-format
1984 @cindex traditional format
1985 @item --traditional-format
1986 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1987 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1988 use the traditional format instead.
1989
1990 @cindex dbx
1991 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1992 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1993 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1994 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1995 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1996 combine duplicate entries.
1997
1998 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1999 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2000 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2001 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2002 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2003 line.
2004 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2005 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2006 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2007 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2008 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2009
2010 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2011 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2012 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2013 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2014 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2015 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2016 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2017 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2018 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2019
2020 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2021 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2022 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2023 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2024 byte of the text segment.
2025
2026 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2027 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2028 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2029 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2030 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2031 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2032
2033 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2034 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2035 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2036 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2037 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2038
2039 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2040 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2041 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2042 values for @samp{method}:
2043
2044 @table @samp
2045 @item ignore-all
2046 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2047
2048 @item report-all
2049 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2050
2051 @item ignore-in-object-files
2052 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2053 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2054
2055 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2056 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2057 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2058 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2059 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2060 command line.
2061 @end table
2062
2063 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2064 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2065
2066 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2067 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2068 can change this to a warning.
2069
2070 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2071 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2072 @item --dll-verbose
2073 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2074 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2075 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2076 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2077 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2078
2079 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2080 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2081 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2082 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2083 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2084 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2085 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2086 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2087 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2088 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2089 @xref{WIN32}.
2090
2091 @kindex --warn-common
2092 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2093 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2094 @item --warn-common
2095 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2096 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2097 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2098 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2099 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2100 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2101
2102 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2103
2104 @table @samp
2105 @item int i = 1;
2106 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2107 file.
2108
2109 @item extern int i;
2110 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2111 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2112 variable somewhere.
2113
2114 @item int i;
2115 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2116 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2117 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2118 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2119 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2120 a definition of the same variable.
2121 @end table
2122
2123 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2124 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2125 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2126 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2127 a common symbol.
2128
2129 @enumerate
2130 @item
2131 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2132 definition for the symbol.
2133 @smallexample
2134 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overridden by definition
2136 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @item
2140 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2141 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2142 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2143 @smallexample
2144 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2145 overriding common
2146 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2147 @end smallexample
2148
2149 @item
2150 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2151 @smallexample
2152 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2153 of `@var{symbol}'
2154 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2155 @end smallexample
2156
2157 @item
2158 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2159 @smallexample
2160 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overridden by larger common
2162 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2163 @end smallexample
2164
2165 @item
2166 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2167 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2168 encountered in a different order.
2169 @smallexample
2170 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2171 overriding smaller common
2172 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2173 @end smallexample
2174 @end enumerate
2175
2176 @kindex --warn-constructors
2177 @item --warn-constructors
2178 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2179 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2180 detect the use of global constructors.
2181
2182 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2183 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2184 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2185 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2186 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2187 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2188 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2189 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2190 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2191 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2192 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2193 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2194 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2195
2196 @kindex --warn-once
2197 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2198 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2199 @item --warn-once
2200 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2201 which refers to it.
2202
2203 @kindex --warn-section-align
2204 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2205 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2206 @item --warn-section-align
2207 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2208 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2209 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2210 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2211 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2212
2213 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2214 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2215 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2216
2217 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2218 @item --warn-alternate-em
2219 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2220
2221 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2222 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2223 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2224 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2225 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2226
2227 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2228 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2229 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2230 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2231
2232 @kindex --whole-archive
2233 @cindex including an entire archive
2234 @item --whole-archive
2235 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2236 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2237 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2238 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2239 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2240 library. This option may be used more than once.
2241
2242 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2243 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2244 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2245 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2246 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2247
2248 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2249 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2250 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2251 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2252 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2253 @var{symbol}.
2254
2255 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2256 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2257 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2258 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2259
2260 Here is a trivial example:
2261
2262 @smallexample
2263 void *
2264 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2265 @{
2266 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2267 return __real_malloc (c);
2268 @}
2269 @end smallexample
2270
2271 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2272 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2273 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2274 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2275
2276 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2277 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2278 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2279 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2280 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2281
2282 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2283 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2284 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2285 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2286 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2287 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2288 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2289
2290 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2291 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2292 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2293 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2294 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2295
2296 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2297 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2298 @item --enable-new-dtags
2299 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2300 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2301 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2302 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2303 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2304 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2305 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2306 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2307
2308 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2309 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2310 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2311 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2312 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2313 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2314 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2315
2316 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2317 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2318 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2319 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2320 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2321 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2322 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2323
2324 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2325 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2326 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2327 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2328 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2329 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2330 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2331 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2332 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2333 compressed using zlib.
2334
2335 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2336 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2337 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2338 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2339 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2340 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2341
2342 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2343 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2344
2345 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2346 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2347 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2348 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2349
2350 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2351 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2352 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2353 @option{--help} option.
2354
2355 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2356 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2357 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2358 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2359 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2360 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2361
2362 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2363 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2364 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2365 has been used.
2366
2367 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2368 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2369
2370 @kindex --build-id
2371 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2372 @item --build-id
2373 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2374 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2375 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2376 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2377 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2378 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2379 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2380 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2381 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2382 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2383 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2384
2385 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2386 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2387 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2388 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2389 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2390 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2391
2392 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2393 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2394 @end table
2395
2396 @c man end
2397
2398 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2399
2400 @c man begin OPTIONS
2401
2402 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2403 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2404 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2405 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2406 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2407 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2408 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2409 object file).
2410
2411 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2412 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2413 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2414 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2415
2416 @table @gcctabopt
2417
2418 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2419 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2420 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2421 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2422 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2423
2424 @kindex --base-file
2425 @item --base-file @var{file}
2426 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2427 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2428 @file{dlltool}.
2429 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2430
2431 @kindex --dll
2432 @item --dll
2433 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2434 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2435 file.
2436 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2437
2438 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2439 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2440 @item --enable-long-section-names
2441 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2442 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2443 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2444 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2445 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2446 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2447 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2448 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2449 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2450 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2451 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2452 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2453 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2454 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2455 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2456 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2457 image and not stripping symbols.
2458 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2459
2460 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2461 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2462 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2463 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2464 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2465 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2466 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2467 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2468 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2469 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2470 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2471 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2472 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2473 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2474 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2475 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2476 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @kindex --leading-underscore
2480 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2481 @item --leading-underscore
2482 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2483 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2484 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2485 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2486
2487 @cindex DLLs, creating
2488 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2489 @item --export-all-symbols
2490 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2491 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2492 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2493 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2494 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2495 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2496 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2497 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2498 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2499 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2500 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2501 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2502 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2503 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2504 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2505 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2506 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2507 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2508 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2509 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2510 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2511 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2512 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2513
2514 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2515 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2516 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2517 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2518 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2519
2520 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2521 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2522 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2523 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2524
2525 @kindex --file-alignment
2526 @item --file-alignment
2527 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2528 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2529 512.
2530 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2531
2532 @cindex heap size
2533 @kindex --heap
2534 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2535 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2536 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2537 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2538 committed.
2539 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2540
2541 @cindex image base
2542 @kindex --image-base
2543 @item --image-base @var{value}
2544 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2545 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2546 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2547 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2548 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2549 for dlls.
2550 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2551
2552 @kindex --kill-at
2553 @item --kill-at
2554 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2555 symbols before they are exported.
2556 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2557
2558 @kindex --large-address-aware
2559 @item --large-address-aware
2560 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2561 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2562 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2563 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2564 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2565 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2566
2567 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2568 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2569 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2570 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2571 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2572 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2573 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
2575 @kindex --major-image-version
2576 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2577 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2578 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2579
2580 @kindex --major-os-version
2581 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2582 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2583 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2584
2585 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2586 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2587 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2588 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2589
2590 @kindex --minor-image-version
2591 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2592 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2593 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2594
2595 @kindex --minor-os-version
2596 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2597 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2598 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2599
2600 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2601 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2602 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2603 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2604
2605 @cindex DEF files, creating
2606 @cindex DLLs, creating
2607 @kindex --output-def
2608 @item --output-def @var{file}
2609 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2610 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2611 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2612 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2613 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2614 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2615
2616 @cindex DLLs, creating
2617 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2618 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2619 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2620 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2621 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2622 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2623 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2624 execution are avoided.
2625 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2626
2627 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2628 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2629 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2630 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2631 default.
2632 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2633
2634 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2635 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2636 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2637 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2638 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2639 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2640 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2641 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2642 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2643 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2644
2645 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2646 @item --enable-auto-import
2647 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2648 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2649 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2650 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2651 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2652 specification published by Microsoft.
2653
2654 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2655 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2656 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2657 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2658 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2659
2660 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2661 see this message:
2662
2663 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2664 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2665
2666 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2667 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2668 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2669 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2670 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2671 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2672 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2673 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2674 the warning, and exit.
2675
2676 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2677 data type of the exported variable:
2678
2679 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2680 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2681 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2682
2683 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2684 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2685 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2686 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2687
2688 @example
2689 extern type extern_array[];
2690 extern_array[1] -->
2691 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2692 @end example
2693
2694 or
2695
2696 @example
2697 extern type extern_array[];
2698 extern_array[1] -->
2699 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2700 @end example
2701
2702 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2703 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2704
2705 @example
2706 extern struct s extern_struct;
2707 extern_struct.field -->
2708 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2709 @end example
2710
2711 or
2712
2713 @example
2714 extern long long extern_ll;
2715 extern_ll -->
2716 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2717 @end example
2718
2719 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2720 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2721 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2722 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2723 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2724 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2725 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2726 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2727
2728 Original:
2729 @example
2730 --foo.h
2731 extern int arr[];
2732 --foo.c
2733 #include "foo.h"
2734 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2735 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2736 @}
2737 @end example
2738
2739 Solution 1:
2740 @example
2741 --foo.h
2742 extern int arr[];
2743 --foo.c
2744 #include "foo.h"
2745 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2746 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2747 volatile int *parr = arr;
2748 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2749 @}
2750 @end example
2751
2752 Solution 2:
2753 @example
2754 --foo.h
2755 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2756 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2757 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2758 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2759 #else
2760 #define FOO_IMPORT
2761 #endif
2762 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2763 --foo.c
2764 #include "foo.h"
2765 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2766 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2767 @}
2768 @end example
2769
2770 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2771 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2772 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2773 functions).
2774 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2777 @item --disable-auto-import
2778 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2779 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2780 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2781
2782 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2783 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2784 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2785 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2786 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2787 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2788 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2789
2790 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2791 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2792 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2793 DLLs.
2794 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2795
2796 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2797 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2798 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2799 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2800
2801 @kindex --section-alignment
2802 @item --section-alignment
2803 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2804 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2805 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2806
2807 @cindex stack size
2808 @kindex --stack
2809 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2810 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2811 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2812 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2813 committed.
2814 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2815
2816 @kindex --subsystem
2817 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2818 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2819 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2820 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2821 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2822 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2823 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2824 @var{which}.
2825 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2826
2827 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2828 of the PE file header:
2829 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2830
2831 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2832 @item --high-entropy-va
2833 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2834 (ASLR).
2835
2836 @kindex --dynamicbase
2837 @item --dynamicbase
2838 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2839 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2840 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2841
2842 @kindex --forceinteg
2843 @item --forceinteg
2844 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2845
2846 @kindex --nxcompat
2847 @item --nxcompat
2848 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2849 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2850
2851 @kindex --no-isolation
2852 @item --no-isolation
2853 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2854
2855 @kindex --no-seh
2856 @item --no-seh
2857 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2858 this image.
2859
2860 @kindex --no-bind
2861 @item --no-bind
2862 Do not bind this image.
2863
2864 @kindex --wdmdriver
2865 @item --wdmdriver
2866 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2867
2868 @kindex --tsaware
2869 @item --tsaware
2870 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2871
2872 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2873 @item --insert-timestamp
2874 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2875 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2876 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2877 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2878 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2879 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2880 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2881 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2882 identically.
2883 @end table
2884
2885 @c man end
2886
2887 @ifset C6X
2888 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2889
2890 @c man begin OPTIONS
2891
2892 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2893 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2894 all executables use an index of 0.
2895
2896 @table @gcctabopt
2897
2898 @kindex --dsbt-size
2899 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2900 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2901 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2902 entries.
2903
2904 @kindex --dsbt-index
2905 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2906 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2907 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2908 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2909 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2910
2911 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2912 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2913 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2914
2915 @end table
2916
2917 @c man end
2918 @end ifset
2919
2920 @ifset M68HC11
2921 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2922
2923 @c man begin OPTIONS
2924
2925 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2926 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2927
2928 @table @gcctabopt
2929
2930 @kindex --no-trampoline
2931 @item --no-trampoline
2932 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2933 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2934 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2935
2936 @kindex --bank-window
2937 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2938 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2939 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2940 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2941 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2942
2943 @end table
2944
2945 @c man end
2946 @end ifset
2947
2948 @ifset M68K
2949 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2950
2951 @c man begin OPTIONS
2952
2953 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2954 when linking for 68K targets.
2955
2956 @table @gcctabopt
2957
2958 @kindex --got
2959 @item --got=@var{type}
2960 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2961 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2962 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2963 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2964
2965 @end table
2966
2967 @c man end
2968 @end ifset
2969
2970 @ifset MIPS
2971 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2972
2973 @c man begin OPTIONS
2974
2975 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2976 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2977
2978 @table @gcctabopt
2979
2980 @kindex --insn32
2981 @item --insn32
2982 @kindex --no-insn32
2983 @itemx --no-insn32
2984 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2985 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2986 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2987 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2988 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2989 possible.
2990
2991 @end table
2992
2993 @c man end
2994 @end ifset
2995
2996 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2997 @node Environment
2998 @section Environment Variables
2999
3000 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3001
3002 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3003 @ifclear SingleFormat
3004 @code{GNUTARGET},
3005 @end ifclear
3006 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3007
3008 @ifclear SingleFormat
3009 @kindex GNUTARGET
3010 @cindex default input format
3011 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3012 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3013 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3014 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3015 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3016 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3017 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3018 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3019 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3020 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3021 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3022 @end ifclear
3023
3024 @kindex LDEMULATION
3025 @cindex default emulation
3026 @cindex emulation, default
3027 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3028 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3029 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3030 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3031 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3032 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3033 linker was configured.
3034
3035 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3036 @cindex demangling, default
3037 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3038 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3039 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3040 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3041 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3042 options.
3043
3044 @c man end
3045 @end ifset
3046
3047 @node Scripts
3048 @chapter Linker Scripts
3049
3050 @cindex scripts
3051 @cindex linker scripts
3052 @cindex command files
3053 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3054 written in the linker command language.
3055
3056 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3057 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3058 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3059 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3060 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3061 described below.
3062
3063 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3064 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3065 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3066 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3067 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3068
3069 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3070 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3071 default linker script.
3072
3073 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3074 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3075 Linker Scripts}.
3076
3077 @menu
3078 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3079 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3080 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3081 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3082 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3083 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3084 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3085 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3086 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3087 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3088 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3089 @end menu
3090
3091 @node Basic Script Concepts
3092 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3093 @cindex linker script concepts
3094 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3095 describe the linker script language.
3096
3097 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3098 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3099 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3100 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3101 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3102 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3103 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3104 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3105
3106 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3107 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3108 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3109 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3110 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3111 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3112 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3113 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3114 of debugging information.
3115
3116 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3117 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3118 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3119 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3120 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3121 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3122 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3123 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3124 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3125 RAM address would be the VMA.
3126
3127 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3128 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3129
3130 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3131 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3132 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3133 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3134 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3135 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3136 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3137
3138 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3139 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3140 option.
3141
3142 @node Script Format
3143 @section Linker Script Format
3144 @cindex linker script format
3145 Linker scripts are text files.
3146
3147 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3148 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3149 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3150 generally ignored.
3151
3152 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3153 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3154 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3155 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3156 file name.
3157
3158 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3159 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3160 to whitespace.
3161
3162 @node Simple Example
3163 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3164 @cindex linker script example
3165 @cindex example of linker script
3166 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3167
3168 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3169 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3170 memory layout of the output file.
3171
3172 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3173 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3174 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3175 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3176 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3177 your input files.
3178
3179 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3180 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3181 linker script which will do that:
3182 @smallexample
3183 SECTIONS
3184 @{
3185 . = 0x10000;
3186 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3187 . = 0x8000000;
3188 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3189 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3190 @}
3191 @end smallexample
3192
3193 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3194 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3195 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3196
3197 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3198 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3199 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3200 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3201 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3202 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3203 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3204
3205 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3206 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3207 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3208 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3209 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3210 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3211
3212 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3213 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3214 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3215
3216 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3217 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3218 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3219 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3220 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3221 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3222 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3223
3224 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3225 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3226 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3227 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3228 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3229 sections.
3230
3231 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3232
3233 @node Simple Commands
3234 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3235 @cindex linker script simple commands
3236 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3237
3238 @menu
3239 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3240 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3241 @ifclear SingleFormat
3242 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3243 @end ifclear
3244
3245 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3246 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3247 @end menu
3248
3249 @node Entry Point
3250 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3251 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3252 @cindex start of execution
3253 @cindex first instruction
3254 @cindex entry point
3255 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3256 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3257 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3258 @smallexample
3259 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3260 @end smallexample
3261
3262 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3263 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3264 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3265 @itemize @bullet
3266 @item
3267 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3268 @item
3269 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3270 @item
3271 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3272 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3273 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3274 @item
3275 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3276 @item
3277 The address @code{0}.
3278 @end itemize
3279
3280 @node File Commands
3281 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3282 @cindex linker script file commands
3283 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3284
3285 @table @code
3286 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3287 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3288 @cindex including a linker script
3289 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3290 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3291 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3292 10 levels deep.
3293
3294 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3295 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3296
3297 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3298 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3299 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3300 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3301 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3302 @cindex linker script input object files
3303 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3304 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3305
3306 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3307 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3308 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3309
3310 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3311 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3312
3313 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3314 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3315 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3316 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3317 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3318 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3319 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3320 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3321 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3322
3323 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3324 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3325 @samp{-l}.
3326
3327 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3328 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3329 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3330
3331 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3332 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3333 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3334 @cindex grouping input files
3335 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3336 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3337 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3338 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3339
3340 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3341 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3342 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3343 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3344 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3345 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3346 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3347 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3348 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3349 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3350 setting afterwards.
3351
3352 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3353 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3354 @cindex output file name in linker script
3355 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3356 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3357 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3358 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3359 precedence.
3360
3361 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3362 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3363
3364 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3365 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3366 @cindex library search path in linker script
3367 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3368 @cindex search path in linker script
3369 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3370 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3371 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3372 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3373 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3374 the command line option are searched first.
3375
3376 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3377 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3378 @cindex first input file
3379 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3380 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3381 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3382 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3383 first file.
3384 @end table
3385
3386 @ifclear SingleFormat
3387 @node Format Commands
3388 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3389 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3390
3391 @table @code
3392 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3393 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3394 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3395 @cindex output file format in linker script
3396 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3397 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3398 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3399 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3400 line option takes precedence.
3401
3402 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3403 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3404 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3405 desired endianness.
3406
3407 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3408 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3409 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3410 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3411
3412 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3413 command:
3414 @smallexample
3415 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3416 @end smallexample
3417 This says that the default format for the output file is
3418 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3419 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3420 format.
3421
3422 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3423 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3424 @cindex input file format in linker script
3425 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3426 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3427 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3428 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3429 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3430 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3431 @end table
3432 @end ifclear
3433
3434 @node REGION_ALIAS
3435 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3436 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3437 @cindex region alias
3438 @cindex region names
3439
3440 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3441 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3442
3443 @smallexample
3444 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3445 @end smallexample
3446
3447 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3448 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3449 to memory regions. An example follows.
3450
3451 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3452 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3453 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3454 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3455 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3456 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3457 sections:
3458
3459 @itemize @bullet
3460 @item
3461 @code{.text} program code;
3462 @item
3463 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3464 @item
3465 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3466 @item
3467 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3468 @end itemize
3469
3470 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3471 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3472 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3473 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3474 @code{C}:
3475 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3476 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3477 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3478 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3479 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3480 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3481 @end multitable
3482 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3483 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3484 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3485 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3486
3487 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3488 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3489 memory layout:
3490 @smallexample
3491 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3492
3493 SECTIONS
3494 @{
3495 .text :
3496 @{
3497 *(.text)
3498 @} > REGION_TEXT
3499 .rodata :
3500 @{
3501 *(.rodata)
3502 rodata_end = .;
3503 @} > REGION_RODATA
3504 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3505 @{
3506 data_start = .;
3507 *(.data)
3508 @} > REGION_DATA
3509 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3510 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3511 .bss :
3512 @{
3513 *(.bss)
3514 @} > REGION_BSS
3515 @}
3516 @end smallexample
3517
3518 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3519 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3520 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3521 @table @code
3522 @item A
3523 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3524 @smallexample
3525 MEMORY
3526 @{
3527 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3528 @}
3529
3530 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3531 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3532 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3533 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3534 @end smallexample
3535 @item B
3536 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3537 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3538 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3539 @smallexample
3540 MEMORY
3541 @{
3542 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3543 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3544 @}
3545
3546 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3547 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3548 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3549 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3550 @end smallexample
3551 @item C
3552 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3553 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3554 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3555 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3556 @smallexample
3557 MEMORY
3558 @{
3559 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3560 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3561 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3562 @}
3563
3564 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3565 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3566 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3567 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3568 @end smallexample
3569 @end table
3570
3571 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3572 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3573 necessary:
3574 @smallexample
3575 #include <string.h>
3576
3577 extern char data_start [];
3578 extern char data_size [];
3579 extern char data_load_start [];
3580
3581 void copy_data(void)
3582 @{
3583 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3584 @{
3585 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3586 @}
3587 @}
3588 @end smallexample
3589
3590 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3591 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3592 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3593
3594 @table @code
3595 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3596 @kindex ASSERT
3597 @cindex assertion in linker script
3598 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3599 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3600
3601 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3602 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3603 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3604 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3605 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3606
3607 @smallexample
3608 .stack :
3609 @{
3610 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3611 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3612 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3613 @}
3614 @end smallexample
3615
3616 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3617 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3618 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3619
3620 @smallexample
3621 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3622 .stack :
3623 @{
3624 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3625 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3626 @}
3627 @end smallexample
3628
3629 will work.
3630
3631 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3632 @kindex EXTERN
3633 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3634 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3635 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3636 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3637 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3638 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3639
3640 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3641 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3642 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3643 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3644 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3645 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3646
3647 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3648 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3649 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3650 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3651 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3652 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3653
3654 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3655 @kindex INSERT
3656 @cindex insert user script into default script
3657 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3658 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3659 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3660 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3661 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3662 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3663 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3664 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3665 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3666 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3667 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3668 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3669 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3670
3671 @smallexample
3672 SECTIONS
3673 @{
3674 OVERLAY :
3675 @{
3676 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3677 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3678 @}
3679 @}
3680 INSERT AFTER .text;
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3684 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3685 @cindex cross references
3686 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3687 references among certain output sections.
3688
3689 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3690 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3691 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3692 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3693 a function defined in the other section.
3694
3695 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3696 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3697 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3698 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3699 names.
3700
3701 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3702 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3703 @cindex cross references
3704 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3705 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3706
3707 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3708 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3709 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3710 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3711 must never call back.
3712
3713 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3714 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3715 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3716 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3717 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3718 names, not input section names.
3719
3720 @ifclear SingleFormat
3721 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3722 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3723 @cindex machine architecture
3724 @cindex architecture
3725 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3726 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3727 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3728 the @samp{-f} option.
3729 @end ifclear
3730
3731 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3732 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3733 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3734 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3735 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3736 @xref{Expression Section}.
3737 @end table
3738
3739 @node Assignments
3740 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3741 @cindex assignment in scripts
3742 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3743 @cindex variables, defining
3744 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3745 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3746
3747 @menu
3748 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3749 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3750 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3751 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3752 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3753 @end menu
3754
3755 @node Simple Assignments
3756 @subsection Simple Assignments
3757
3758 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3759
3760 @table @code
3761 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3762 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3763 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3764 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3765 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3766 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3767 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3768 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3769 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3770 @end table
3771
3772 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3773 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3774 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3775
3776 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3777 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3778
3779 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3780
3781 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3782
3783 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3784 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3785 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3786
3787 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3788 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3789
3790 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3791 assignments may be used:
3792
3793 @smallexample
3794 floating_point = 0;
3795 SECTIONS
3796 @{
3797 .text :
3798 @{
3799 *(.text)
3800 _etext = .;
3801 @}
3802 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3803 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3804 @}
3805 @end smallexample
3806 @noindent
3807 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3808 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3809 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3810 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3811 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3812
3813 @node HIDDEN
3814 @subsection HIDDEN
3815 @cindex HIDDEN
3816 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3817 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3818
3819 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3820 @code{HIDDEN}:
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3824 SECTIONS
3825 @{
3826 .text :
3827 @{
3828 *(.text)
3829 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3830 @}
3831 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3832 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3833 @}
3834 @end smallexample
3835 @noindent
3836 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3837
3838 @node PROVIDE
3839 @subsection PROVIDE
3840 @cindex PROVIDE
3841 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3842 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3843 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3844 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3845 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3846 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3847 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3848 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3849
3850 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3851 @smallexample
3852 SECTIONS
3853 @{
3854 .text :
3855 @{
3856 *(.text)
3857 _etext = .;
3858 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3859 @}
3860 @}
3861 @end smallexample
3862
3863 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3864 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3865 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3866 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3867 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3868 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3869
3870 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3871 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3872 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3873 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3874 hidden and won't be exported.
3875
3876 @node Source Code Reference
3877 @subsection Source Code Reference
3878
3879 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3880 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3881 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3882 symbol that does not have a value.
3883
3884 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3885 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3886 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3887 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3888 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3889 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3890 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3891 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 extern int foo;
3895 @end smallexample
3896
3897 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3898
3899 @smallexample
3900 _foo = 1000;
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3904 transformation has taken place.
3905
3906 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3907 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3908 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3909 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3910 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3911 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3912 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3913
3914 @smallexample
3915 int foo = 1000;
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3919 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3920 number 1000 is initially stored.
3921
3922 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3923 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3924 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3925 So:
3926
3927 @smallexample
3928 foo = 1;
3929 @end smallexample
3930
3931 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3932 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3933 address. Whereas:
3934
3935 @smallexample
3936 int * a = & foo;
3937 @end smallexample
3938
3939 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3940 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3941 the variable @samp{a}.
3942
3943 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3944 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3945 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3946
3947 @smallexample
3948 foo = 1000;
3949 @end smallexample
3950
3951 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3952 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3953 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3954 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3955 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3956
3957 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3958 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3959 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3960 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3961 linker script contains these declarations:
3962
3963 @smallexample
3964 @group
3965 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3966 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3967 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3968 @end group
3969 @end smallexample
3970
3971 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3972
3973 @smallexample
3974 @group
3975 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3976
3977 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3978 @end group
3979 @end smallexample
3980
3981 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3982 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3983 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3984
3985 @smallexample
3986 @group
3987 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3988
3989 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3990 @end group
3991 @end smallexample
3992
3993 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3994 operators.
3995
3996 @node SECTIONS
3997 @section SECTIONS Command
3998 @kindex SECTIONS
3999 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4000 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4001
4002 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4003 @smallexample
4004 SECTIONS
4005 @{
4006 @var{sections-command}
4007 @var{sections-command}
4008 @dots{}
4009 @}
4010 @end smallexample
4011
4012 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4013
4014 @itemize @bullet
4015 @item
4016 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4017 @item
4018 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4019 @item
4020 an output section description
4021 @item
4022 an overlay description
4023 @end itemize
4024
4025 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4026 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4027 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4028 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4029 the layout of the output file.
4030
4031 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4032 below.
4033
4034 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4035 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4036 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4037 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4038 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4039 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4040
4041 @menu
4042 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4043 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4044 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4045 * Input Section:: Input section description
4046 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4047 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4048 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4049 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4050 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4051 @end menu
4052
4053 @node Output Section Description
4054 @subsection Output Section Description
4055 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4056 @smallexample
4057 @group
4058 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4059 [AT(@var{lma})]
4060 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4061 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4062 [@var{constraint}]
4063 @{
4064 @var{output-section-command}
4065 @var{output-section-command}
4066 @dots{}
4067 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4068 @end group
4069 @end smallexample
4070
4071 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4072
4073 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4074 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4075 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4076 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4077 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4078
4079 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4080
4081 @itemize @bullet
4082 @item
4083 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4084 @item
4085 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4086 @item
4087 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4088 @item
4089 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4090 @end itemize
4091
4092 @node Output Section Name
4093 @subsection Output Section Name
4094 @cindex name, section
4095 @cindex section name
4096 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4097 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4098 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4099 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4100 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4101 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4102 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4103 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4104 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4105 commas must be quoted.
4106
4107 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4108 Discarding}.
4109
4110 @node Output Section Address
4111 @subsection Output Section Address
4112 @cindex address, section
4113 @cindex section address
4114 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4115 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4116 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4117
4118 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4119 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4120 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4121 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4122 contained within the output section.
4123
4124 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4125
4126 @itemize @bullet
4127 @item
4128 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4129 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4130 in that region.
4131
4132 @item
4133 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4134 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4135 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4136 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4137
4138 @item
4139 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4140 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4141 counter.
4142 @end itemize
4143
4144 @noindent
4145 For example:
4146
4147 @smallexample
4148 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 @noindent
4152 and
4153
4154 @smallexample
4155 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4156 @end smallexample
4157
4158 @noindent
4159 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4160 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4161 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4162 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4163 input sections.
4164
4165 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4166 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4167 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4168 do something like this:
4169 @smallexample
4170 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4171 @end smallexample
4172 @noindent
4173 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4174 aligned upward to the specified value.
4175
4176 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4177 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4178 sections are ignored).
4179
4180 @node Input Section
4181 @subsection Input Section Description
4182 @cindex input sections
4183 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4184 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4185
4186 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4187 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4188 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4189 map the input files into your memory layout.
4190
4191 @menu
4192 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4193 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4194 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4195 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4196 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4197 @end menu
4198
4199 @node Input Section Basics
4200 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4201 @cindex input section basics
4202 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4203 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4204
4205 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4206 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4207
4208 The most common input section description is to include all input
4209 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4210 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4211 @smallexample
4212 *(.text)
4213 @end smallexample
4214 @noindent
4215 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4216 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4217 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4218 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4219 example:
4220 @smallexample
4221 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4222 @end smallexample
4223 @noindent
4224 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4225 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4226 placed inside the section list, for example:
4227 @smallexample
4228 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4229 @end smallexample
4230 @noindent
4231 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4232 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4233 more than one section, as described below.
4234
4235 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4236 @smallexample
4237 *(.text .rdata)
4238 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4239 @end smallexample
4240 @noindent
4241 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4242 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4243 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4244 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4245 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4246 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4247
4248 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4249 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4250 immediately following section, for example:
4251 @smallexample
4252 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4253 @end smallexample
4254 @noindent
4255 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4256 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4257 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4258 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4259 could be modified to:
4260 @smallexample
4261 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4262 @end smallexample
4263 @noindent
4264 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4265 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4266 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4267 @smallexample
4268 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4269 @end smallexample
4270
4271 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4272 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4273 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4274 @smallexample
4275 data.o(.data)
4276 @end smallexample
4277
4278 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4279 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4280
4281 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4282
4283 @smallexample
4284 @group
4285 SECTIONS @{
4286 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4287 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4288 @}
4289 @end group
4290 @end smallexample
4291
4292 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4293 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4294 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4295 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4296 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4297
4298 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4299 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4300 with no whitespace around the colon.
4301
4302 @table @samp
4303 @item archive:file
4304 matches file within archive
4305 @item archive:
4306 matches the whole archive
4307 @item :file
4308 matches file but not one in an archive
4309 @end table
4310
4311 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4312 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4313 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4314 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4315 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4316 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4317 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4318 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4319 command.
4320
4321 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4322 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4323 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4324 @smallexample
4325 data.o
4326 @end smallexample
4327
4328 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4329 and does not contain any wild card
4330 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4331 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4332 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4333 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4334 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4335 the archive search path.
4336
4337 @node Input Section Wildcards
4338 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4339 @cindex input section wildcards
4340 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4341 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4342 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4343 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4344 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4345
4346 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4347 pattern for the file name.
4348
4349 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4350
4351 @table @samp
4352 @item *
4353 matches any number of characters
4354 @item ?
4355 matches any single character
4356 @item [@var{chars}]
4357 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4358 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4359 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4360 @item \
4361 quotes the following character
4362 @end table
4363
4364 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4365 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4366 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4367 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4368 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4369 a @samp{/} character.
4370
4371 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4372 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4373 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4374
4375 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4376 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4377 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4378 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4379 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4380 @smallexample
4381 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4382 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4383 @end smallexample
4384
4385 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4386 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4387 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4388 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4389 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4390 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4391 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4392
4393 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4394 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4395 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4396 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4397 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4398 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4399
4400 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4401 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4402 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4403 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4404 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4405
4406 @cindex SORT
4407 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4408
4409 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4410 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4411
4412 @enumerate
4413 @item
4414 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4415 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4416 sections have the same name.
4417 @item
4418 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4419 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4420 sections have the same alignment.
4421 @item
4422 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4423 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4424 @item
4425 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4426 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4427 @item
4428 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4429 @end enumerate
4430
4431 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4432 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4433 takes precedence over the command line option.
4434
4435 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4436 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4437 treated as nested sorting command.
4438
4439 @enumerate
4440 @item
4441 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4442 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4443 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4444 @item
4445 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4446 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4447 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4448 @end enumerate
4449
4450 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4451 command line option will be ignored.
4452
4453 @cindex SORT_NONE
4454 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4455 section sorting option.
4456
4457 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4458 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4459 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4460
4461 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4462 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4463 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4464 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4465 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4466 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4467 @smallexample
4468 @group
4469 SECTIONS @{
4470 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4471 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4472 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4473 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4474 @}
4475 @end group
4476 @end smallexample
4477
4478 @node Input Section Common
4479 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4480 @cindex common symbol placement
4481 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4482 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4483 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4484 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4485 named @samp{COMMON}.
4486
4487 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4488 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4489 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4490 input files are placed in another section.
4491
4492 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4493 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4494 @smallexample
4495 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4496 @end smallexample
4497
4498 @cindex scommon section
4499 @cindex small common symbols
4500 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4501 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4502 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4503 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4504 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4505 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4506 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4507 locations.
4508
4509 @cindex [COMMON]
4510 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4511 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4512 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4513
4514 @node Input Section Keep
4515 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4516 @cindex KEEP
4517 @cindex garbage collection
4518 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4519 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4520 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4521 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4522 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4523
4524 @node Input Section Example
4525 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4526 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4527 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4528 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4529 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4530 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4531 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4532 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4533 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4534 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4535
4536 @smallexample
4537 @group
4538 SECTIONS @{
4539 outputa 0x10000 :
4540 @{
4541 all.o
4542 foo.o (.input1)
4543 @}
4544 @end group
4545 @group
4546 outputb :
4547 @{
4548 foo.o (.input2)
4549 foo1.o (.input1)
4550 @}
4551 @end group
4552 @group
4553 outputc :
4554 @{
4555 *(.input1)
4556 *(.input2)
4557 @}
4558 @}
4559 @end group
4560 @end smallexample
4561
4562 @node Output Section Data
4563 @subsection Output Section Data
4564 @cindex data
4565 @cindex section data
4566 @cindex output section data
4567 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4568 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4569 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4570 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4571 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4572 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4573 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4574 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4575 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4576 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4577 counter.
4578
4579 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4580 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4581 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4582 stored.
4583
4584 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4585 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4586 @smallexample
4587 BYTE(1)
4588 LONG(addr)
4589 @end smallexample
4590
4591 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4592 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4593 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4594 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4595 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4596
4597 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4598 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4599 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4600 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4601 endianness of the first input object file.
4602
4603 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4604 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4605 @smallexample
4606 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4607 @end smallexample
4608 whereas this will work:
4609 @smallexample
4610 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4611 @end smallexample
4612
4613 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4614 @cindex holes, filling
4615 @cindex unspecified memory
4616 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4617 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4618 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4619 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4620 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4621 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4622 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4623 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4624 different parts of an output section.
4625
4626 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4627 value @samp{0x90}:
4628 @smallexample
4629 FILL(0x90909090)
4630 @end smallexample
4631
4632 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4633 section attribute, but it only affects the
4634 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4635 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4636 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4637 expression.
4638
4639 @node Output Section Keywords
4640 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4641 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4642 commands.
4643
4644 @table @code
4645 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4646 @cindex input filename symbols
4647 @cindex filename symbols
4648 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4649 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4650 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4651 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4652 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4653
4654 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4655 normally used for any other object file format.
4656
4657 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4658 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4659 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4660 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4661 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4662 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4663 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4664 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4665 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4666 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4667 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4668 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4669 ignored for other object file formats.
4670
4671 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4672 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4673 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4674 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4675 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4676 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4677 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4678 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4679 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4680 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4681 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4682 @code{exit}.
4683
4684 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4685 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4686 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4687 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4688 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4689 runtime code expects to see.
4690
4691 @smallexample
4692 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4693 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4694 *(.ctors)
4695 LONG(0)
4696 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4697 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4698 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4699 *(.dtors)
4700 LONG(0)
4701 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4702 @end smallexample
4703
4704 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4705 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4706 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4707 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4708 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4709 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4710 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4711 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4712
4713 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4714 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4715 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4716 scripts.
4717
4718 @end table
4719
4720 @node Output Section Discarding
4721 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4722 @cindex discarding sections
4723 @cindex sections, discarding
4724 @cindex removing sections
4725 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4726 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4727 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4728 @smallexample
4729 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4730 @end smallexample
4731 @noindent
4732 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4733 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4734 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4735 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4736 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4737 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4738 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4739 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4740 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4741
4742 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4743 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4744 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4745 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4746 section is discarded.
4747
4748 @cindex /DISCARD/
4749 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4750 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4751 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4752
4753 @node Output Section Attributes
4754 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4755 @cindex output section attributes
4756 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4757 like this:
4758
4759 @smallexample
4760 @group
4761 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4762 [AT(@var{lma})]
4763 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4764 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4765 [@var{constraint}]
4766 @{
4767 @var{output-section-command}
4768 @var{output-section-command}
4769 @dots{}
4770 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4771 @end group
4772 @end smallexample
4773
4774 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4775 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4776 remaining section attributes.
4777
4778 @menu
4779 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4780 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4781 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4782 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4783 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4784 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4785 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4786 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4787 @end menu
4788
4789 @node Output Section Type
4790 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4791 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4792 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4793
4794 @table @code
4795 @item NOLOAD
4796 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4797 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4798 @item DSECT
4799 @itemx COPY
4800 @itemx INFO
4801 @itemx OVERLAY
4802 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4803 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4804 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4805 section when the program is run.
4806 @end table
4807
4808 @kindex NOLOAD
4809 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4810 @cindex loading, preventing
4811 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4812 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4813 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4814 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4815 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4816 @smallexample
4817 @group
4818 SECTIONS @{
4819 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4820 @dots{}
4821 @}
4822 @end group
4823 @end smallexample
4824
4825 @node Output Section LMA
4826 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4827 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4828 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4829 @cindex load address
4830 @cindex section load address
4831 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4832 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4833 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4834 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4835 address is optional.
4836
4837 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4838 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4839 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4840 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4841 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4842
4843 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4844 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4845 load address:
4846
4847 @itemize @bullet
4848 @item
4849 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4850 the LMA address as well.
4851
4852 @item
4853 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4854
4855 @item
4856 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4857 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4858 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4859 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4860 the last section in the located region.
4861
4862 @item
4863 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4864 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4865
4866 @item
4867 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4868 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4869 @end itemize
4870
4871 @cindex ROM initialized data
4872 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4873 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4874 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4875 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4876 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4877 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4878 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4879 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4880 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4881
4882 @smallexample
4883 @group
4884 SECTIONS
4885 @{
4886 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4887 .mdata 0x2000 :
4888 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4889 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4890 .bss 0x3000 :
4891 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4892 @}
4893 @end group
4894 @end smallexample
4895
4896 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4897 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4898 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4899 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4900 script.
4901
4902 @smallexample
4903 @group
4904 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4905 char *src = &_etext;
4906 char *dst = &_data;
4907
4908 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4909 while (dst < &_edata)
4910 *dst++ = *src++;
4911
4912 /* Zero bss. */
4913 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4914 *dst = 0;
4915 @end group
4916 @end smallexample
4917
4918 @node Forced Output Alignment
4919 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4920 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4921 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4922 @cindex output section alignment
4923 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4924 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4925 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4926
4927 @node Forced Input Alignment
4928 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4929 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4930 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4931 @cindex input section alignment
4932 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4933 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4934 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4935
4936 @node Output Section Constraint
4937 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4938 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4939 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4940 @cindex constraints on output sections
4941 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4942 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4943 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4944 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4945
4946 @node Output Section Region
4947 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4948 @kindex >@var{region}
4949 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4950 @cindex memory regions and sections
4951 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4952 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4953
4954 Here is a simple example:
4955 @smallexample
4956 @group
4957 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4958 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4959 @end group
4960 @end smallexample
4961
4962 @node Output Section Phdr
4963 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4964 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4965 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4966 @cindex program headers and sections
4967 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4968 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4969 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4970 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4971 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4972 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4973
4974 Here is a simple example:
4975 @smallexample
4976 @group
4977 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4978 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4979 @end group
4980 @end smallexample
4981
4982 @node Output Section Fill
4983 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4984 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4985 @cindex section fill pattern
4986 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4987 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4988 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4989 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4990 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4991 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4992 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4993 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4994 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4995 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4996 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4997 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4998 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4999
5000 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5001 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5002
5003 Here is a simple example:
5004 @smallexample
5005 @group
5006 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5007 @end group
5008 @end smallexample
5009
5010 @node Overlay Description
5011 @subsection Overlay Description
5012 @kindex OVERLAY
5013 @cindex overlays
5014 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5015 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5016 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5017 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5018 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5019 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5020 than another.
5021
5022 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5023 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5024 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5025 command is as follows:
5026 @smallexample
5027 @group
5028 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5029 @{
5030 @var{secname1}
5031 @{
5032 @var{output-section-command}
5033 @var{output-section-command}
5034 @dots{}
5035 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5036 @var{secname2}
5037 @{
5038 @var{output-section-command}
5039 @var{output-section-command}
5040 @dots{}
5041 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5042 @dots{}
5043 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5044 @end group
5045 @end smallexample
5046
5047 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5048 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5049 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5050 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5051 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5052 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5053
5054 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5055 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5056
5057 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5058 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5059 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5060 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5061 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5062 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5063
5064 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5065 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5066 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5067 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5068 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5069
5070 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5071 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5072 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5073 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5074 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5075 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5076 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5077
5078 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5079 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5080
5081 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5082 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5083 @smallexample
5084 @group
5085 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5086 @{
5087 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5088 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5089 @}
5090 @end group
5091 @end smallexample
5092 @noindent
5093 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5094 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5095 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5096 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5097 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5098 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5099
5100 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5101 like the following.
5102
5103 @smallexample
5104 @group
5105 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5106 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5107 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5108 @end group
5109 @end smallexample
5110
5111 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5112 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5113 example could have been written identically as follows.
5114
5115 @smallexample
5116 @group
5117 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5118 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5119 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5120 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5121 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5122 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5123 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5124 @end group
5125 @end smallexample
5126
5127 @node MEMORY
5128 @section MEMORY Command
5129 @kindex MEMORY
5130 @cindex memory regions
5131 @cindex regions of memory
5132 @cindex allocating memory
5133 @cindex discontinuous memory
5134 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5135 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5136
5137 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5138 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5139 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5140 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5141 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5142 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5143 around to fit into the available regions.
5144
5145 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5146 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5147 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5148 @code{MEMORY} is:
5149 @smallexample
5150 @group
5151 MEMORY
5152 @{
5153 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5154 @dots{}
5155 @}
5156 @end group
5157 @end smallexample
5158
5159 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5160 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5161 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5162 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5163 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5164 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5165 command.
5166
5167 @cindex memory region attributes
5168 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5169 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5170 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5171 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5172 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5173 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5174 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5175
5176 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5177 @table @samp
5178 @item R
5179 Read-only section
5180 @item W
5181 Read/write section
5182 @item X
5183 Executable section
5184 @item A
5185 Allocatable section
5186 @item I
5187 Initialized section
5188 @item L
5189 Same as @samp{I}
5190 @item !
5191 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5192 @end table
5193
5194 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5195 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5196 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5197 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5198 attributes.
5199
5200 @kindex ORIGIN =
5201 @kindex o =
5202 @kindex org =
5203 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5204 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5205 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5206 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5207 @code{ORG}).
5208
5209 @kindex LENGTH =
5210 @kindex len =
5211 @kindex l =
5212 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5213 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5214 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5215 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5216
5217 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5218 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5219 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5220 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5221 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5222 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5223 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5224 region.
5225
5226 @smallexample
5227 @group
5228 MEMORY
5229 @{
5230 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5231 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5232 @}
5233 @end group
5234 @end smallexample
5235
5236 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5237 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5238 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5239 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5240 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5241 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5242 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5243 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5244 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5245
5246 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5247 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5248 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5249
5250 @smallexample
5251 @group
5252 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5253 @end group
5254 @end smallexample
5255
5256 @node PHDRS
5257 @section PHDRS Command
5258 @kindex PHDRS
5259 @cindex program headers
5260 @cindex ELF program headers
5261 @cindex program segments
5262 @cindex segments, ELF
5263 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5264 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5265 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5266 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5267
5268 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5269 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5270 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5271 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5272 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5273
5274 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5275 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5276 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5277 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5278 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5279
5280 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5281 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5282 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5283
5284 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5285 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5286
5287 @smallexample
5288 @group
5289 PHDRS
5290 @{
5291 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5292 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5293 @}
5294 @end group
5295 @end smallexample
5296
5297 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5298 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5299 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5300 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5301 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5302 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5303
5304 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5305 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5306 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5307 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5308 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5309 Section Phdr}.
5310
5311 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5312 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5313 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5314 contain the section.
5315
5316 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5317 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5318 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5319 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5320 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5321 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5322 segment at all.
5323
5324 @kindex FILEHDR
5325 @kindex PHDRS
5326 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5327 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5328 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5329 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5330 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5331 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5332 these keywords.
5333
5334 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5335 value of the keyword.
5336
5337 @table @asis
5338 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5339 Indicates an unused program header.
5340
5341 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5342 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5343 the file.
5344
5345 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5346 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5347
5348 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5349 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5350 found.
5351
5352 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5353 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5354
5355 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5356 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5357 ABI.
5358
5359 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5360 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5361
5362 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5363 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5364
5365 @item @var{expression}
5366 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5367 be used for types not defined above.
5368 @end table
5369
5370 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5371 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5372 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5373 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5374 output section attribute.
5375
5376 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5377 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5378 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5379 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5380 header.
5381
5382 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5383 headers used on a native ELF system.
5384
5385 @example
5386 @group
5387 PHDRS
5388 @{
5389 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5390 interp PT_INTERP ;
5391 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5392 data PT_LOAD ;
5393 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5394 @}
5395
5396 SECTIONS
5397 @{
5398 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5399 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5400 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5401 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5402 @dots{}
5403 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5404 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5405 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5406 @dots{}
5407 @}
5408 @end group
5409 @end example
5410
5411 @node VERSION
5412 @section VERSION Command
5413 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5414 @cindex symbol versions
5415 @cindex version script
5416 @cindex versions of symbols
5417 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5418 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5419 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5420 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5421 shared library.
5422
5423 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5424 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5425 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5426
5427 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5428 @smallexample
5429 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5430 @end smallexample
5431
5432 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5433 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5434 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5435 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5436 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5437 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5438 library.
5439
5440 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5441 examples.
5442
5443 @smallexample
5444 VERS_1.1 @{
5445 global:
5446 foo1;
5447 local:
5448 old*;
5449 original*;
5450 new*;
5451 @};
5452
5453 VERS_1.2 @{
5454 foo2;
5455 @} VERS_1.1;
5456
5457 VERS_2.0 @{
5458 bar1; bar2;
5459 extern "C++" @{
5460 ns::*;
5461 "f(int, double)";
5462 @};
5463 @} VERS_1.2;
5464 @end smallexample
5465
5466 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5467 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5468 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5469 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5470 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5471 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5472 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5473 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5474 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5475 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5476
5477 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5478 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5479 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5480
5481 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5482 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5483 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5484
5485 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5486 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5487 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5488 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5489 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5490 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5491 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5492 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5493 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5494
5495 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5496 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5497 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5498 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5499
5500 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5501 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5502 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5503 won't.
5504
5505 @smallexample
5506 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5507 @end smallexample
5508
5509 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5510 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5511 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5512 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5513 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5514 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5515 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5516 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5517 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5518 search for each symbol reference.
5519
5520 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5521 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5522 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5523 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5524 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5525 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5526 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5527 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5528 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5529
5530 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5531 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5532 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5533 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5534 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5535 @smallexample
5536 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5537 @end smallexample
5538 @noindent
5539 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5540 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5541 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5542 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5543 takes precedence over a version script.
5544
5545 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5546 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5547 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5548 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5549 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5550
5551 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5552 source file. Here is an example:
5553
5554 @smallexample
5555 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5556 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5557 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5558 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5559 @end smallexample
5560
5561 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5562 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5563 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5564 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5565
5566 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5567 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5568 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5569 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5570 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5571 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5572
5573 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5574 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5575 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5576 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5577
5578 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5579
5580 @smallexample
5581 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5582 @end smallexample
5583
5584 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5585 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5586 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5587 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5588 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5589
5590 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5591 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5592 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5593 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5594 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5595 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5596 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5597 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5598 expect when you upgrade.
5599
5600 @node Expressions
5601 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5602 @cindex expressions
5603 @cindex arithmetic
5604 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5605 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5606 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5607 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5608
5609 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5610
5611 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5612 expressions.
5613
5614 @menu
5615 * Constants:: Constants
5616 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5617 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5618 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5619 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5620 * Operators:: Operators
5621 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5622 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5623 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5624 @end menu
5625
5626 @node Constants
5627 @subsection Constants
5628 @cindex integer notation
5629 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5630 All constants are integers.
5631
5632 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5633 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5634 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5635 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5636 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5637 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5638
5639 @cindex scaled integers
5640 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5641 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5642 @cindex suffixes for integers
5643 @cindex integer suffixes
5644 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5645 constant by
5646 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5647 @ifnottex
5648 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5649 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5650 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5651 @end ifnottex
5652 @tex
5653 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5654 @end tex
5655 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5656 respectively. For example, the following
5657 all refer to the same quantity:
5658
5659 @smallexample
5660 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5661 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5662 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5663 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5664 @end smallexample
5665
5666 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5667 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5668
5669 @node Symbolic Constants
5670 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5671 @cindex symbolic constants
5672 @kindex CONSTANT
5673 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5674 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5675
5676 @table @code
5677 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5678 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5679 The target's maximum page size.
5680
5681 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5682 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5683 The target's default page size.
5684 @end table
5685
5686 So for example:
5687
5688 @smallexample
5689 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5690 @end smallexample
5691
5692 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5693 supported by the target.
5694
5695 @node Symbols
5696 @subsection Symbol Names
5697 @cindex symbol names
5698 @cindex names
5699 @cindex quoted symbol names
5700 @kindex "
5701 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5702 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5703 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5704 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5705 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5706 @smallexample
5707 "SECTION" = 9;
5708 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5709 @end smallexample
5710
5711 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5712 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5713 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5714
5715 @node Orphan Sections
5716 @subsection Orphan Sections
5717 @cindex orphan
5718 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5719 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5720 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5721 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5722 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5723 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5724 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5725 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5726 at the end of the file.
5727
5728 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5729 well as section flag.
5730
5731 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5732 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5733 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5734
5735 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5736 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5737 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5738 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5739 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5740 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5741 character.
5742
5743 @node Location Counter
5744 @subsection The Location Counter
5745 @kindex .
5746 @cindex dot
5747 @cindex location counter
5748 @cindex current output location
5749 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5750 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5751 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5752 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5753 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5754
5755 @cindex holes
5756 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5757 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5758 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5759 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5760 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5761
5762 @smallexample
5763 SECTIONS
5764 @{
5765 output :
5766 @{
5767 file1(.text)
5768 . = . + 1000;
5769 file2(.text)
5770 . += 1000;
5771 file3(.text)
5772 @} = 0x12345678;
5773 @}
5774 @end smallexample
5775 @noindent
5776 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5777 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5778 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5779 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5780 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5781 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5782
5783 @cindex dot inside sections
5784 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5785 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5786 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5787 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5788 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5789 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5790
5791 @smallexample
5792 SECTIONS
5793 @{
5794 . = 0x100
5795 .text: @{
5796 *(.text)
5797 . = 0x200
5798 @}
5799 . = 0x500
5800 .data: @{
5801 *(.data)
5802 . += 0x600
5803 @}
5804 @}
5805 @end smallexample
5806
5807 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5808 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5809 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5810 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5811 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5812 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5813 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5814 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5815
5816 @cindex dot outside sections
5817 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5818 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5819 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5820
5821 @smallexample
5822 SECTIONS
5823 @{
5824 start_of_text = . ;
5825 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5826 end_of_text = . ;
5827
5828 start_of_data = . ;
5829 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5830 end_of_data = . ;
5831 @}
5832 @end smallexample
5833
5834 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5835 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5836 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5837 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5838 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5839 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5840 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5841 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5842 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5843 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5844 as follows:
5845
5846 @smallexample
5847 SECTIONS
5848 @{
5849 start_of_text = . ;
5850 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5851 end_of_text = . ;
5852
5853 start_of_data = . ;
5854 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5855 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5856 end_of_data = . ;
5857 @}
5858 @end smallexample
5859
5860 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5861 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5862 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5863 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5864 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5865 section. So you could write:
5866
5867 @smallexample
5868 SECTIONS
5869 @{
5870 start_of_text = . ;
5871 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5872 end_of_text = . ;
5873
5874 . = . ;
5875 start_of_data = . ;
5876 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5877 end_of_data = . ;
5878 @}
5879 @end smallexample
5880
5881 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5882 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5883
5884 @need 2000
5885 @node Operators
5886 @subsection Operators
5887 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5888 @cindex arithmetic operators
5889 @cindex precedence in expressions
5890 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5891 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5892 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5893 @ifnottex
5894 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5895 @smallexample
5896 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5897 (highest)
5898 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5899 2 left * / %
5900 3 left + -
5901 4 left >> <<
5902 5 left == != > < <= >=
5903 6 left &
5904 7 left |
5905 8 left &&
5906 9 left ||
5907 10 right ? :
5908 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5909 (lowest)
5910 @end smallexample
5911 Notes:
5912 (1) Prefix operators
5913 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5914 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5915 @end ifnottex
5916 @tex
5917 \vskip \baselineskip
5918 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5919 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5920 \hrule
5921 \halign
5922 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5923 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5924 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5925 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5926 \noalign{\hrule}
5927 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5928 &highest&&&&&\cr
5929 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5930 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5931 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5932 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5933 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5934 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5935 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5936 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5937 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5938 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5939 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5940 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5941 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5942 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5943 \hrule}
5944 @end tex
5945 @iftex
5946 {
5947 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5948 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5949 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5950 }
5951 @end iftex
5952 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5953
5954 @node Evaluation
5955 @subsection Evaluation
5956 @cindex lazy evaluation
5957 @cindex expression evaluation order
5958 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5959 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5960
5961 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5962 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5963 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5964 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5965
5966 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5967 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5968 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5969 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5970
5971 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5972 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5973 allocation.
5974
5975 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5976 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5977
5978 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5979 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5980 following
5981 @smallexample
5982 @group
5983 SECTIONS
5984 @{
5985 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5986 @{ *(.text) @}
5987 @}
5988 @end group
5989 @end smallexample
5990 @noindent
5991 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5992 address}.
5993
5994 @node Expression Section
5995 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5996 @cindex expression sections
5997 @cindex absolute expressions
5998 @cindex relative expressions
5999 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6000 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6001 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6002 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6003 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6004 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6005 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6006 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6007 operations.
6008
6009 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6010 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6011 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6012 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6013 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6014 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6015 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6016 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6017 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6018 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6019 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6020 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6021 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6022 everywhere.
6023
6024 In the following simple example,
6025
6026 @smallexample
6027 @group
6028 SECTIONS
6029 @{
6030 . = 0x100;
6031 __executable_start = 0x100;
6032 .data :
6033 @{
6034 . = 0x10;
6035 __data_start = 0x10;
6036 *(.data)
6037 @}
6038 @dots{}
6039 @}
6040 @end group
6041 @end smallexample
6042
6043 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6044 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6045 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6046 section in the second two assignments.
6047
6048 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6049 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6050
6051 @itemize @bullet
6052 @item
6053 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6054 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6055 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6056 @item
6057 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6058 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6059 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6060 @item
6061 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6062 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6063 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6064 before applying the operator.
6065 @end itemize
6066
6067 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6068
6069 @itemize @bullet
6070 @item
6071 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6072 @item
6073 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6074 @item
6075 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6076 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6077 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6078 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6079 but an absolute address otherwise.
6080 @item
6081 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6082 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6083 section as the relative operand(s).
6084 @item
6085 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6086 conversions) is an absolute address.
6087 @end itemize
6088
6089 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6090 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6091 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6092 section @samp{.data}:
6093 @smallexample
6094 SECTIONS
6095 @{
6096 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6097 @}
6098 @end smallexample
6099 @noindent
6100 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6101 @samp{.data} section.
6102
6103 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6104 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6105
6106 @node Builtin Functions
6107 @subsection Builtin Functions
6108 @cindex functions in expressions
6109 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6110 use in linker script expressions.
6111
6112 @table @code
6113 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6114 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6115 @cindex expression, absolute
6116 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6117 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6118 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6119 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6120
6121 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6122 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6123 @cindex section address in expression
6124 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6125 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6126 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6127 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6128 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6129 the other two will be absolute:
6130 @smallexample
6131 @group
6132 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6133 .output1 :
6134 @{
6135 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6136 @dots{}
6137 @}
6138 .output :
6139 @{
6140 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6141 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6142 @}
6143 @dots{} @}
6144 @end group
6145 @end smallexample
6146
6147 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6148 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6149 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6150 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6151 @cindex round up location counter
6152 @cindex align location counter
6153 @cindex round up expression
6154 @cindex align expression
6155 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6156 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6157 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6158 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6159 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6160 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6161
6162 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6163 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6164 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6165 input sections:
6166 @smallexample
6167 @group
6168 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6169 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6170 *(.data)
6171 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6172 @}
6173 @dots{} @}
6174 @end group
6175 @end smallexample
6176 @noindent
6177 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6178 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6179 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6180 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6181
6182 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6183
6184 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6185 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6186 @cindex section alignment
6187 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6188 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6189 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6190 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6191 value in that section.
6192 @smallexample
6193 @group
6194 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6195 .output @{
6196 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6197 @dots{}
6198 @}
6199 @dots{} @}
6200 @end group
6201 @end smallexample
6202
6203 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6204 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6205 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6206 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6207 section.
6208
6209 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6210 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6211 This is equivalent to either
6212 @smallexample
6213 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6214 @end smallexample
6215 or
6216 @smallexample
6217 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6218 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6219 @end smallexample
6220 @noindent
6221 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6222 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6223 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6224 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6225 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6226 bytes in the on-disk file.
6227
6228 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6229 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6230 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6231 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6232 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6233
6234 @noindent
6235 Example:
6236 @smallexample
6237 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6238 @end smallexample
6239
6240 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6241 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6242 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6243 evaluation purposes.
6244
6245 @smallexample
6246 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6247 @end smallexample
6248
6249 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6250 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6251 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6252 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6253 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6254 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6255 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6256 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6257 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6258 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6259 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6260 section alignment.
6261
6262 @smallexample
6263 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6264 @end smallexample
6265
6266 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6267 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6268 @cindex symbol defaults
6269 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6270 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6271 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6272 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6273 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6274 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6275 existed, its value is preserved:
6276
6277 @smallexample
6278 @group
6279 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6280 .text : @{
6281 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6282 @dots{}
6283 @}
6284 @dots{}
6285 @}
6286 @end group
6287 @end smallexample
6288
6289 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6290 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6291 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6292
6293 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6294 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6295 @cindex section load address in expression
6296 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6297 Section LMA}).
6298
6299 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6300 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6301 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6302 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6303
6304 @kindex MAX
6305 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6306 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6307
6308 @kindex MIN
6309 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6310 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6311
6312 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6313 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6314 @cindex unallocated address, next
6315 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6316 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6317 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6318 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6319
6320 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6321 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6322 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6323
6324 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6325 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6326 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6327 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6328 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6329 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6330 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6331 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6332 name.
6333
6334 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6335 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6336 @cindex section size
6337 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6338 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6339 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6340 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6341 @smallexample
6342 @group
6343 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6344 .output @{
6345 .start = . ;
6346 @dots{}
6347 .end = . ;
6348 @}
6349 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6350 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6351 @dots{} @}
6352 @end group
6353 @end smallexample
6354
6355 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6356 @itemx sizeof_headers
6357 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6358 @cindex header size
6359 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6360 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6361 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6362 choose, to facilitate paging.
6363
6364 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6365 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6366 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6367 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6368 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6369 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6370 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6371 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6372 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6373 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6374 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6375 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6376 @end table
6377
6378 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6379 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6380 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6381 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6382 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6383 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6384 linker will report an error.
6385
6386 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6387
6388 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6389 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6390 commands.
6391
6392 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6393 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6394 read. This can affect archive searching.
6395
6396 @ifset GENERIC
6397 @node Machine Dependent
6398 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6399
6400 @cindex machine dependencies
6401 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6402 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6403 functionality are not listed.
6404
6405 @menu
6406 @ifset H8300
6407 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6408 @end ifset
6409 @ifset I960
6410 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6411 @end ifset
6412 @ifset M68HC11
6413 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6414 @end ifset
6415 @ifset ARM
6416 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6417 @end ifset
6418 @ifset HPPA
6419 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6420 @end ifset
6421 @ifset M68K
6422 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6423 @end ifset
6424 @ifset MIPS
6425 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6426 @end ifset
6427 @ifset MMIX
6428 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6429 @end ifset
6430 @ifset MSP430
6431 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6432 @end ifset
6433 @ifset NDS32
6434 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6435 @end ifset
6436 @ifset NIOSII
6437 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6438 @end ifset
6439 @ifset POWERPC
6440 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6441 @end ifset
6442 @ifset POWERPC64
6443 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6444 @end ifset
6445 @ifset SPU
6446 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6447 @end ifset
6448 @ifset TICOFF
6449 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6450 @end ifset
6451 @ifset WIN32
6452 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6453 @end ifset
6454 @ifset XTENSA
6455 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6456 @end ifset
6457 @end menu
6458 @end ifset
6459
6460 @ifset H8300
6461 @ifclear GENERIC
6462 @raisesections
6463 @end ifclear
6464
6465 @node H8/300
6466 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6467
6468 @cindex H8/300 support
6469 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6470 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6471
6472 @table @emph
6473 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6474 @item relaxing address modes
6475 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6476 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6477 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6478 respectively.
6479
6480 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6481 @item synthesizing instructions
6482 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6483 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6484 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6485 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6486 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6487 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6488 top page of memory).
6489
6490 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6491 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6492 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6493 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6494 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6495 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6496 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6497
6498 @item bit manipulation instructions
6499 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6500 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6501 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6502 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6503 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6504 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6505 the top page of memory).
6506
6507 @item system control instructions
6508 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6509 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6510 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6511 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6512 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6513 the top page of memory).
6514 @end table
6515
6516 @ifclear GENERIC
6517 @lowersections
6518 @end ifclear
6519 @end ifset
6520
6521 @ifclear GENERIC
6522 @ifset Renesas
6523 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6524 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6525 @node Renesas
6526 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6527
6528 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6529 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6530 options are required for these chips.
6531 @end ifset
6532 @end ifclear
6533
6534 @ifset I960
6535 @ifclear GENERIC
6536 @raisesections
6537 @end ifclear
6538
6539 @node i960
6540 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6541
6542 @cindex i960 support
6543
6544 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6545 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6546 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6547 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6548 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6549 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6550 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6551
6552 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6553 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6554 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6555 the names
6556
6557 @smallexample
6558 @group
6559 try
6560 libtry.a
6561 tryca
6562 libtryca.a
6563 @end group
6564 @end smallexample
6565
6566 @noindent
6567 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6568 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6569
6570 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6571 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6572 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6573 specifies a library.
6574
6575 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6576 @cindex relaxing on i960
6577 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6578 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6579 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6580 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6581 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6582 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6583 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6584 not itself call any subroutines).
6585
6586 @ifclear GENERIC
6587 @lowersections
6588 @end ifclear
6589 @end ifset
6590
6591 @ifset ARM
6592 @ifclear GENERIC
6593 @raisesections
6594 @end ifclear
6595
6596 @ifset M68HC11
6597 @ifclear GENERIC
6598 @raisesections
6599 @end ifclear
6600
6601 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6602 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6603
6604 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6605
6606 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6607
6608 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6609 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6610
6611 @table @emph
6612 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6613 @item relaxing address modes
6614 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6615 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6616 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6617 respectively.
6618
6619 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6620 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6621 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6622
6623 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6624 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6625 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6626 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6627 @code{bset} instructions.
6628
6629 @end table
6630
6631 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6632
6633 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6634 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6635 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6636 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6637 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6638 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6639 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6640 point to the function trampoline.
6641
6642 @ifclear GENERIC
6643 @lowersections
6644 @end ifclear
6645 @end ifset
6646
6647 @node ARM
6648 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6649
6650 @cindex ARM interworking support
6651 @kindex --support-old-code
6652 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6653 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6654 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6655 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6656 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6657 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6658 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6659 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6660 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6661 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6662
6663 @cindex thumb entry point
6664 @cindex entry point, thumb
6665 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6666 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6667 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6668 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6669 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6670 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6671
6672 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6673 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6674 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6675 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6676 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6677 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6678
6679 @cindex BE8
6680 @kindex --be8
6681 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6682 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6683 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6684 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6685 little-endian code.
6686
6687 @cindex TARGET1
6688 @kindex --target1-rel
6689 @kindex --target1-abs
6690 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6691 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6692 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6693 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6694
6695 @cindex TARGET2
6696 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6697 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6698 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6699 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6700 @table @samp
6701 @item rel
6702 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6703 @item abs
6704 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6705 @item got-rel
6706 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6707 @end table
6708
6709 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6710 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6711 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6712 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6713 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6714 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6715
6716 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6717 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6718 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6719
6720 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6721 relocations are ignored.
6722
6723 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6724 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6725 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6726 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6727
6728 @smallexample
6729 TST rM, #1
6730 MOVEQ PC, rM
6731 BX Rn
6732 @end smallexample
6733
6734 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6735 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6736 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6737
6738 @cindex USE_BLX
6739 @kindex --use-blx
6740 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6741 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6742 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6743 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6744 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6745
6746 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6747 specify it if you are using that target.
6748
6749 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6750 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6751 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6752 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6753 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6754 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6755 the support code can read the intended values.
6756
6757 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6758 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6759 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6760 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6761 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6762 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6763
6764 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6765 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6766 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6767 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6768 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6769 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6770
6771 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6772 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6773 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6774 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6775 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6776 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6777 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6778
6779 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6780 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6781 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6782 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6783 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6784 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6785 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6786
6787 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6788 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6789 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6790
6791 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6792 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6793
6794 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6795 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6796 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6797 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6798 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6799 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6800 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6801 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6802
6803 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6804 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6805
6806 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6807 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6808 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6809 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6810 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6811
6812 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6813 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6814 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6815 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6816 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6817 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6818
6819 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6820 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6821
6822 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6823 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6824 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6825 occurs.
6826
6827 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6828 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6829 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6830 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6831 occurs.
6832
6833 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6834 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6835 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6836 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6837 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6838 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6839 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6840 not be diagnosed.
6841
6842 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6843 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6844 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6845 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6846 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6847 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6848 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6849
6850 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6851 @kindex --pic-veneer
6852 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6853 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6854 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6855 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6856
6857 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6858 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6859 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6860 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6861 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6862 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6863 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6864 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6865 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6866 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6867 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6868 where they should be placed.
6869
6870 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6871 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6872 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6873 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6874 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6875 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6876 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6877 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6878 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6879 from the input sections.
6880
6881 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6882 @samp{N = +1}.
6883
6884 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6885 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6886 otherwise.
6887
6888 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6889 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6890 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6891 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6892
6893 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6894
6895 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6896 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6897 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6898 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6899
6900 Please contact ARM for further details.
6901
6902 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6903 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6904 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6905 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6906
6907 @kindex --long-plt
6908 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6909 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6910 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6911 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6912
6913 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6914 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
6915 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6916 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6917
6918 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
6919 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6920 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6921 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6922 veneers in memory.
6923
6924 @kindex --cmse-implib
6925 @cindex Secure gateway import library
6926 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6927 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6928 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6929 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6930
6931 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6932 @cindex Input import library
6933 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6934 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6935 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6936 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6937 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6938 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6939 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6940 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6941 specified.
6942
6943 @ifclear GENERIC
6944 @lowersections
6945 @end ifclear
6946 @end ifset
6947
6948 @ifset HPPA
6949 @ifclear GENERIC
6950 @raisesections
6951 @end ifclear
6952
6953 @node HPPA ELF32
6954 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6955 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6956 @kindex --multi-subspace
6957 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6958 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6959 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6960 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6961 multiple sub-spaces.
6962
6963 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6964 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6965 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6966 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6967 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6968 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6969 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6970 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6971 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6972 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6973 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6974 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6975 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6976 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6977 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6978 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6979
6980 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6981 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6982 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6983 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6984
6985 @ifclear GENERIC
6986 @lowersections
6987 @end ifclear
6988 @end ifset
6989
6990 @ifset M68K
6991 @ifclear GENERIC
6992 @raisesections
6993 @end ifclear
6994
6995 @node M68K
6996 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6997
6998 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6999 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7000 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7001 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7002 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7003 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7004 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7005 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7006 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7007 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7008 support such GOTs.
7009 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7010 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7011 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7012 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7013
7014 @ifclear GENERIC
7015 @lowersections
7016 @end ifclear
7017 @end ifset
7018
7019 @ifset MIPS
7020 @ifclear GENERIC
7021 @raisesections
7022 @end ifclear
7023
7024 @node MIPS
7025 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7026
7027 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7028 @kindex --insn32
7029 @kindex --no-insn32
7030 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7031 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7032 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7033 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7034 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7035 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7036
7037 @ifclear GENERIC
7038 @lowersections
7039 @end ifclear
7040 @end ifset
7041
7042 @ifset MMIX
7043 @ifclear GENERIC
7044 @raisesections
7045 @end ifclear
7046
7047 @node MMIX
7048 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7049 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7050 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7051 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7052 can translate between the two formats.
7053
7054 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7055 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7056 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7057 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7058 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7059 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7060 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7061 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7062
7063 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7064 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7065 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7066 of a section.
7067
7068 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7069 are left out from an mmo file.
7070
7071 @ifclear GENERIC
7072 @lowersections
7073 @end ifclear
7074 @end ifset
7075
7076 @ifset MSP430
7077 @ifclear GENERIC
7078 @raisesections
7079 @end ifclear
7080
7081 @node MSP430
7082 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7083 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7084 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7085 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7086
7087 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7088 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7089
7090 @table @code
7091 @item @samp{.vectors}
7092 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7093
7094 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7095 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7096 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7097
7098 @item @samp{.infomem}
7099 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7100 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7101
7102 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7103 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7104 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7105
7106 @item @samp{.noinit}
7107 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7108
7109 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7110 @end table
7111
7112 @ifclear GENERIC
7113 @lowersections
7114 @end ifclear
7115 @end ifset
7116
7117 @ifset NDS32
7118 @ifclear GENERIC
7119 @raisesections
7120 @end ifclear
7121
7122 @node NDS32
7123 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7124 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7125 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7126 relaxes objects according to these options.
7127
7128 @table @code
7129 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7130 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7131
7132 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7133 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7134
7135 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7136 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7137
7138 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7139 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7140
7141 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7142 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7143
7144 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7145 Update the existing EX9 table.
7146
7147 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7148 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7149
7150 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7151 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7152
7153 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7154 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7155
7156 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7157 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7158 @end table
7159
7160 @ifclear GENERIC
7161 @lowersections
7162 @end ifclear
7163 @end ifset
7164
7165 @ifset NIOSII
7166 @ifclear GENERIC
7167 @raisesections
7168 @end ifclear
7169
7170 @node Nios II
7171 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7172 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7173 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7174
7175 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7176 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7177 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7178 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7179 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7180 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7181 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7182 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7183 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7184 larger than 256MB.
7185
7186 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7187 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7188 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7189 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7190 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7191 register as a temporary.
7192
7193 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7194 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7195 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7196
7197 @ifclear GENERIC
7198 @lowersections
7199 @end ifclear
7200 @end ifset
7201
7202 @ifset POWERPC
7203 @ifclear GENERIC
7204 @raisesections
7205 @end ifclear
7206
7207 @node PowerPC ELF32
7208 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7209 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7210 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7211 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7212 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7213 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7214 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7215 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7216 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7217 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7218 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7219 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7220 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7221
7222 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7223 @table @option
7224 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7225 @kindex --bss-plt
7226 @item --bss-plt
7227 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7228 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7229 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7230 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7231 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7232 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7233 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7234 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7235
7236 @kindex --secure-plt
7237 @item --secure-plt
7238 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7239 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7240 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7241 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7242 style BSS PLT.
7243
7244 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7245 @kindex --sdata-got
7246 @item --sdata-got
7247 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7248 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7249 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7250 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7251 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7252 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7253 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7254 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7255 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7256 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7257 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7258 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7259
7260 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7261 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7262 @item --emit-stub-syms
7263 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7264 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7265
7266 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7267 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7268 @item --no-tls-optimize
7269 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7270 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7271 disable the optimization.
7272 @end table
7273
7274 @ifclear GENERIC
7275 @lowersections
7276 @end ifclear
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @ifset POWERPC64
7280 @ifclear GENERIC
7281 @raisesections
7282 @end ifclear
7283
7284 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7285 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7286
7287 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7288 @table @option
7289 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7290 @kindex --stub-group-size
7291 @item --stub-group-size
7292 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7293 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7294 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7295 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7296 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7297 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7298 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7299 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7300 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7301 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7302 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7303 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7304 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7305 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7306
7307 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7308 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7309 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7310 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7311
7312 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7313 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7314 @item --emit-stub-syms
7315 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7316 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7317
7318 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7319 @kindex --dotsyms
7320 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7321 @item --dotsyms
7322 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7323 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7324 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7325 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7326 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7327 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7328 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7329 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7330 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7331 feature.
7332
7333 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7334 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7335 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7336 @item --save-restore-funcs
7337 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7338 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7339 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7340 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7341 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7342 link.
7343
7344 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7345 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7346 @item --no-tls-optimize
7347 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7348 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7349 disable the optimization.
7350
7351 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7352 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7353 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7354 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7355 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7356 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7357 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7358 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7359 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7360 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7361 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7362 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7363 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7364 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7365 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7366
7367 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7368 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7369 @item --no-opd-optimize
7370 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7371 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7372 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7373 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7374
7375 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7376 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7377 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7378 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7379 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7380 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7381 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7382
7383 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7384 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7385 @item --no-toc-optimize
7386 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7387 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7388 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7389 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7390 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7391 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7392 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7393 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7394 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7395 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7396 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7397 optimization.
7398
7399 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7400 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7401 @item --no-multi-toc
7402 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7403 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7404 where TOC
7405 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7406 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7407 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7408 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7409 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7410 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7411 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7412 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7413
7414 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7415 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7416 @item --no-toc-sort
7417 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7418 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7419 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7420 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7421 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7422 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7423 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7424 off this feature.
7425
7426 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7427 @kindex --plt-align
7428 @kindex --no-plt-align
7429 @item --plt-align
7430 @itemx --no-plt-align
7431 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7432 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7433 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7434 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7435 stubs are packed tightly.
7436
7437 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7438 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7439 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7440 @item --plt-static-chain
7441 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7442 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7443 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7444 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7445
7446 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7447 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7448 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7449 @item --plt-thread-safe
7450 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7451 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7452 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7453 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7454 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7455 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7456 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7457 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7458 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7459 default behaviour.
7460 @end table
7461
7462 @ifclear GENERIC
7463 @lowersections
7464 @end ifclear
7465 @end ifset
7466
7467 @ifset SPU
7468 @ifclear GENERIC
7469 @raisesections
7470 @end ifclear
7471
7472 @node SPU ELF
7473 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7474
7475 @cindex SPU ELF options
7476 @table @option
7477
7478 @cindex SPU plugins
7479 @kindex --plugin
7480 @item --plugin
7481 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7482
7483 @cindex SPU overlays
7484 @kindex --no-overlays
7485 @item --no-overlays
7486 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7487 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7488 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7489 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7490
7491 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7492 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7493 @item --emit-stub-syms
7494 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7495 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7496
7497 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7498 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7499 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7500 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7501 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7502 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7503
7504 @cindex SPU local store size
7505 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7506 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7507 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7508 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7509 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7510
7511 @cindex SPU
7512 @kindex --stack-analysis
7513 @item --stack-analysis
7514 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7515 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7516 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7517 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7518 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7519 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7520 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7521 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7522 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7523 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7524 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7525 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7526 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7527 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7528 and calls will be given.
7529
7530 @cindex SPU
7531 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7532 @item --emit-stack-syms
7533 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7534 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7535 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7536 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7537 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7538 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7539 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7540 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7541 @end table
7542
7543 @ifclear GENERIC
7544 @lowersections
7545 @end ifclear
7546 @end ifset
7547
7548 @ifset TICOFF
7549 @ifclear GENERIC
7550 @raisesections
7551 @end ifclear
7552
7553 @node TI COFF
7554 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7555 @cindex TI COFF versions
7556 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7557 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7558 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7559 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7560 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7561 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7562
7563 @ifclear GENERIC
7564 @lowersections
7565 @end ifclear
7566 @end ifset
7567
7568 @ifset WIN32
7569 @ifclear GENERIC
7570 @raisesections
7571 @end ifclear
7572
7573 @node WIN32
7574 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7575
7576 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7577 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7578 command line options mentioned here.
7579
7580 @table @emph
7581 @cindex import libraries
7582 @item import libraries
7583 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7584 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7585 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7586 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7587 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7588 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7589
7590 @item exporting DLL symbols
7591 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7592 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7593
7594 @table @emph
7595 @item using auto-export functionality
7596 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7597 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7598 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7599
7600 @itemize
7601 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7602 @item --exclude-symbols
7603 @item --exclude-libs
7604 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7605 @item --version-script
7606 @end itemize
7607
7608 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7609 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7610 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7611 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7612 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7613 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7614 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7615 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7616
7617 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7618 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7619 if either of the following are true:
7620
7621 @itemize
7622 @item A DEF file is used.
7623 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7624 @end itemize
7625
7626 @item using a DEF file
7627 @cindex using a DEF file
7628 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7629 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7630 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7631 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7632 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7633
7634 @example
7635 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7636 @end example
7637
7638 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7639 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7640
7641 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7642
7643 @example
7644 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7645
7646 EXPORTS
7647 foo
7648 bar
7649 _bar = bar
7650 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7651 var1 DATA
7652 doo = foo == foo2
7653 eoo DATA == var1
7654 @end example
7655
7656 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7657 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7658 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7659 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7660 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7661 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7662 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7663 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7664 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7665
7666 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7667 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7668 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7669
7670 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7671 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7672 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7673 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7674
7675 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7676 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7677 non-default base address for the image.
7678
7679 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7680 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7681 filename specified on the command line.
7682
7683 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7684
7685 @example
7686 EXPORTS
7687 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7688 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7689 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7690 @end example
7691
7692 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7693 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7694 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7695 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7696 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7697 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7698 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7699
7700 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7701
7702 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7703 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7704 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7705 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7706 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7707
7708 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7709 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7710 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7711 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7712
7713 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7714 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7715 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7716 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7717 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7718 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7719 application will behave unexpectedly.
7720
7721 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7722 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7723 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7724 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7725 the DLL without an import library.
7726
7727 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7728 other DEF file statements
7729
7730 @cindex creating a DEF file
7731 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7732 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7733
7734 @item Using decorations
7735 @cindex Using decorations
7736 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7737 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7738 declared as:
7739
7740 @example
7741 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7742 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7743 @end example
7744
7745 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7746 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7747 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7748 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7749
7750 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7751 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7752 instead:
7753
7754 @example
7755 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7756 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7757 @end example
7758
7759 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7760 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7761 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7762 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7763 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7764 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7765 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7766 information.
7767 @end table
7768
7769 @cindex automatic data imports
7770 @item automatic data imports
7771 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7772 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7773 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7774 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7775 code to these platforms, especially for large
7776 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7777 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7778 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7779 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7780 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7781 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7782 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7783 trigger the feature's use.
7784
7785 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7786 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7787
7788 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7789 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7790
7791 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7792 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7793 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7794 below.
7795
7796 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7797 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7798 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7799 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7800 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7801 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7802 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7803 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7804 references.
7805
7806 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7807 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7808 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7809 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7810 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7811 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7812 run without error on an older system.
7813
7814 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7815 enabled as needed.
7816
7817 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7818 @item direct linking to a dll
7819 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7820 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7821 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7822 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7823 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7824 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7825 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7826 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7827 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7828 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7829
7830 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7831 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7832 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7833 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7834 select the dll instead of an import library.
7835
7836
7837 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7838 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7839
7840 @example
7841 libxxx.dll.a
7842 xxx.dll.a
7843 libxxx.a
7844 xxx.lib
7845 cygxxx.dll (*)
7846 libxxx.dll
7847 xxx.dll
7848 @end example
7849
7850 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7851
7852 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7853 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7854 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7855 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7856 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7857
7858 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7859 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7860 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7861 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7862 could coexist on the same machine.
7863
7864 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7865 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7866 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7867
7868 @example
7869 bin/
7870 cygxxx.dll
7871 lib/
7872 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7873 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7874 @end example
7875
7876 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7877 done two ways:
7878
7879 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7880 @example
7881 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7882 @end example
7883
7884 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7885 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7886 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7887 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7888
7889 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7890 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7891 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7892 making the app/dll.
7893
7894 @example
7895 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7896 @end example
7897
7898 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7899
7900 @example
7901 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7902 @end example
7903
7904 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7905 perfectly legal
7906
7907 @example
7908 bin/
7909 cygxxx-5.dll
7910 lib/
7911 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7912 @end example
7913
7914 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7915 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7916 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7917
7918 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7919 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7920
7921 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7922 work with auto-imported data.
7923
7924 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7925 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7926 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7927 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7928 possible to do this without an import lib.
7929
7930 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7931 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7932 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7933 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7934
7935 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7936 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7937 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7938 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7939 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7940 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7941 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7942
7943 @item symbol aliasing
7944 @table @emph
7945 @item adding additional names
7946 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7947 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7948 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7949 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7950 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7951
7952 @example
7953 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7954
7955 EXPORTS
7956 foo
7957 _foo = foo
7958 @end example
7959
7960 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7961
7962 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7963 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7964
7965 @example
7966 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7967 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7968 @end example
7969
7970 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7971 symbols.
7972
7973 @item renaming symbols
7974 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7975 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7976 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7977 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7978 created). In the following example:
7979
7980 @example
7981 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7982
7983 EXPORTS
7984 _foo = foo
7985 @end example
7986
7987 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7988 @samp{_foo}.
7989 @end table
7990
7991 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7992 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7993 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7994 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7995 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7996 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7997 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7998 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7999 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8000 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8001 which is probably not what you wanted.
8002
8003 @cindex weak externals
8004 @item weak externals
8005 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8006 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8007 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8008 are three variants of weak externals:
8009 @itemize
8010 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8011 called lazy externals.
8012 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8013 This form is not presently implemented.
8014 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8015 implemented.
8016 @end itemize
8017 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8018 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8019 uses a default value.
8020
8021 @cindex aligned common symbols
8022 @item aligned common symbols
8023 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8024 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8025 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8026 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8027 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8028 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8029 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8030 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8031
8032 @end table
8033
8034 @ifclear GENERIC
8035 @lowersections
8036 @end ifclear
8037 @end ifset
8038
8039 @ifset XTENSA
8040 @ifclear GENERIC
8041 @raisesections
8042 @end ifclear
8043
8044 @node Xtensa
8045 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8046
8047 @cindex Xtensa processors
8048 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8049 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8050 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8051 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8052 example, with the command:
8053
8054 @smallexample
8055 SECTIONS
8056 @{
8057 .text : @{
8058 *(.literal .text)
8059 @}
8060 @}
8061 @end smallexample
8062
8063 @noindent
8064 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8065 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8066 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8067 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8068 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8069 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8070 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8071
8072 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8073 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8074 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8075 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8076 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8077 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8078 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8079 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8080 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8081 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8082 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8083 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8084
8085 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8086 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8087 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8088 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8089 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8090 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8091 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8092 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8093 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8094 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8095 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8096 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8097 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8098 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8099
8100 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8101 control the linker:
8102
8103 @cindex Xtensa options
8104 @table @option
8105 @item --size-opt
8106 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8107 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8108 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8109 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8110 preserve the correctness of the code.
8111 @end table
8112
8113 @ifclear GENERIC
8114 @lowersections
8115 @end ifclear
8116 @end ifset
8117
8118 @ifclear SingleFormat
8119 @node BFD
8120 @chapter BFD
8121
8122 @cindex back end
8123 @cindex object file management
8124 @cindex object formats available
8125 @kindex objdump -i
8126 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8127 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8128 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8129 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8130 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8131 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8132 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8133 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8134 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8135
8136 @cindex BFD requirements
8137 @cindex requirements for BFD
8138 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8139 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8140 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8141 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8142 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8143 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8144 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8145
8146 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8147 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8148 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8149 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8150
8151 @menu
8152 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8153 @end menu
8154
8155 @node BFD outline
8156 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8157 @cindex opening object files
8158 @include bfdsumm.texi
8159 @end ifclear
8160
8161 @node Reporting Bugs
8162 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8163 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8164 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8165
8166 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8167
8168 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8169 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8170 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8171 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8172 @command{ld}.
8173
8174 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8175 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8176
8177 @menu
8178 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8179 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8180 @end menu
8181
8182 @node Bug Criteria
8183 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8184 @cindex bug criteria
8185
8186 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8187
8188 @itemize @bullet
8189 @cindex fatal signal
8190 @cindex linker crash
8191 @cindex crash of linker
8192 @item
8193 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8194 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8195
8196 @cindex error on valid input
8197 @item
8198 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8199
8200 @cindex invalid input
8201 @item
8202 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8203 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8204 object files are correct.
8205
8206 @item
8207 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8208 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8209 @end itemize
8210
8211 @node Bug Reporting
8212 @section How to Report Bugs
8213 @cindex bug reports
8214 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8215
8216 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8217 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8218 recommend you contact that organization first.
8219
8220 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8221 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8222 distribution.
8223
8224 @ifset BUGURL
8225 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8226 @value{BUGURL}.
8227 @end ifset
8228
8229 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8230 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8231 fact or leave it out, state it!
8232
8233 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8234 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8235 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8236 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8237 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8238 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8239 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8240 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8241 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8242 and the most helpful.
8243
8244 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8245 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8246 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8247
8248 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8249 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8250 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8251 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8252
8253 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8254
8255 @itemize @bullet
8256 @item
8257 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8258 the @samp{--version} argument.
8259
8260 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8261 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8262
8263 @item
8264 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8265 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8266
8267 @item
8268 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8269 version number.
8270
8271 @item
8272 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8273 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8274
8275 @item
8276 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8277 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8278 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8279 sufficient.
8280
8281 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8282 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8283
8284 @item
8285 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8286 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8287 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8288 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8289 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8290 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8291 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8292 attachments are best.
8293
8294 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8295 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8296 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8297 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8298 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8299
8300 @item
8301 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8302 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8303
8304 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8305 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8306 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8307 a chance to make a mistake.
8308
8309 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8310 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8311 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8312 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8313 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8314 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8315 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8316 any conclusion from our observations.
8317
8318 @item
8319 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8320 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8321 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8322 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8323 context, not by line number.
8324
8325 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8326 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8327 @end itemize
8328
8329 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8330
8331 @itemize @bullet
8332 @item
8333 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8334
8335 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8336 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8337 changes will not affect it.
8338
8339 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8340 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8341 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8342 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8343
8344 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8345 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8346 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8347 less time, and so on.
8348
8349 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8350 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8351
8352 @item
8353 A patch for the bug.
8354
8355 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8356 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8357 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8358 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8359
8360 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8361 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8362 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8363 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8364 fixed.
8365
8366 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8367 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8368 help us to understand.
8369
8370 @item
8371 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8372
8373 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8374 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8375 @end itemize
8376
8377 @node MRI
8378 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8379 @cindex MRI compatibility
8380 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8381 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8382 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8383 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8384 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8385 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8386 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8387
8388 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8389 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8390 features to make use of them.
8391
8392 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8393 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8394
8395 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8396 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8397 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8398 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8399 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8400
8401 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8402
8403 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8404 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8405 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8406
8407 @table @code
8408 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8409 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8410 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8411 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8412 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8413 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8414 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8415 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8416 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8417 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8418 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8419
8420 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8421 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8422 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8423 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8424
8425 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8426
8427 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8428 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8429 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8430 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8431
8432 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8433 @item BASE @var{expression}
8434 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8435 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8436
8437 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8438 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8439 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8440 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8441
8442 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8443 @item END
8444 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8445
8446 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8447 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8448 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8449 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8450
8451 @enumerate
8452 @item
8453 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8454
8455 @item
8456 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8457
8458 @item
8459 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8460 @samp{COFF}
8461 @end enumerate
8462
8463 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8464 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8465 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8466 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8467
8468 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8469 same line, with no change in its effect.
8470
8471 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8472 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8473 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8474 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8475 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8476 command line.
8477
8478 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8479 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8480 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8481 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8482 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8483
8484 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8485 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8486 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8487 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8488 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8489 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8490 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8491 file, in the order specified.
8492
8493 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8494 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8495 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8496 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8497 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8498 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8499
8500 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8501 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8502 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8503 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8504 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8505 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8506 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8507 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8508 @end table
8509
8510 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8511 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8512 @include fdl.texi
8513
8514 @node LD Index
8515 @unnumbered LD Index
8516
8517 @printindex cp
8518
8519 @tex
8520 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8521 % meantime:
8522 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8523 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8524 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8525 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8526 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8527 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8528 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8529 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8530 \page\colophon
8531 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8532 @end tex
8533
8534 @bye
This page took 0.214963 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.